JP7242576B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state for a player.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) is satisfied, a specific display (suspension display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means. For variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, there are those capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. can be considered.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display based on establishment of a starting condition and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emitting effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
The effect executing means is configured to perform the specific light emission so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect when the starting condition is established. In addition to executing the effect, the light emitting means is made non-light emitting for a predetermined period from when the starting condition is satisfied until the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
The ratio of displaying the specific display of the special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than the ratio of displaying the specific display of the first special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the start effect B is executed, the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash as a winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. the part where the lamp 9d emits light),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and performs variable display using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Further, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Furthermore, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in JP 2016-83580 A, a predetermined number of times variable to a high probability state (variable probability state) which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the normal state There is a gaming machine that is controlled over the number of display times.

However, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) that is controlled to the high probability state (variable probability state) again occurs repeatedly. There is a problem that it may be granted in between, and there is a fear that the player's gambling spirit will be excessively agitated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made by paying attention to such problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of preventing excessive increase in gambling nature due to excessive game value given in a short period of time. aim.

The game machine of means 1 is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling property from excessively increasing due to the impartation of game value, and to improve the amusement of the game because performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed. .

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display start production|presentation execution processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the specific display start production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is the schematic of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of updating a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer; It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 loss and super reach α2 loss. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 jackpot and the super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting motion and an image magnification ratio in each enlargement display period; (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of each movable body action suggesting effect, and (B) is a view showing an effect mode of each movable body action effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form to the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic portion 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating effect control commands. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern, and a ball-out state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main process in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the ball-out state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball-out state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of progress of the big win and the state of opening and closing the big prize opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the big win (excluding the probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the loss. is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved memory display area and the second reserved memory display area. . 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing advance notice effect type determination tables A to C; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning variation pattern determination table to be selected according to the value of the put-out state flag;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display start effect execution process, and the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed ), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to FIG. 10-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display effect execution processing, so that the pending display and active display is displayed as a rotation animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the start effect B is executed, the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash as a winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means may display the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A in which a reserved display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the upper part, and a character A is displayed in the first reserved state). It can be displayed in a specific display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the suspended display and the active display appear gradually from the bottom to the top after acting on the storage display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-29 (A), FIG. 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
The "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only the state of emitting light at low luminance but also the state of not emitting light.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means once controls the display means to a low visibility state, and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), FIGS. 10-49 (A) to 10-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIG. 10-28 , Figures 10-29 (A) ~ Figure 10-32 (H), Figures 10-49 (A) ~ Figure 10-50 (D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning. If this is done, after the sound output corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. This is an effect that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the hindrance to other performances caused by the light emission.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the early winning, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means in the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby obstructing other displays and increasing the interest in the game. decline can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying an effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2) during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in the first output mode, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light-emitting effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light-emitting effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. .

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, the late winning flash effect process table is selected again, and the process timer for the late winning flash effect process timer is reset and started. Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ as shown in Fig. 10-89(n), even during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 18, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. In the previous variable display pattern fixing period, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J)). , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the production starts, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific production (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the white-out period, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at luminance C2) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emission mode does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIGS. 10-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 10-90, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash is started from the start timing of the reach effect of super reach after that. A portion for lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a luminance of C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 shown in FIG. 10-108 (A) , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 10-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part where the lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F continues),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 26,
Light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119 (A) and 10-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the game ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 10-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 10-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect in accordance with the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 10-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 32 is the gaming machine according to form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 10-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily recognized by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not the specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 33 is the gaming machine according to form 31 or 32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form 34 is the gaming machine according to form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIGS. 10-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed in the display pattern ε, the part where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 36 is the gaming machine according to form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific luminous effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, as a flash effect at the time of winning, the image display device 5 has different sizes The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 37 is the gaming machine according to form 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display targeted for the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 10-28, 10-42(a) to 10-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emission means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed before the ready-to-win effect starts. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is emitted at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 41 is the gaming machine according to form 40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-8, the first start port is operated during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in Example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starter lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 47 is the gaming machine according to form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A part where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 48 is the gaming machine according to form 46 or 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display, which is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the starting winning flash effect. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a flash effect at the time of winning. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the flashing periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one having an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 is a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is displayed by the circular reserved display. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

10-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature section 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present characterizing portion 135SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG is such that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed once, are common normal reach reach effects. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic part 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times The fluctuation pattern of losing) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous performance).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10 is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B has not started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing portion 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6). It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range at step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 judgment values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range of possible fluctuation pattern judgment random numbers MR3. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

In step 135SGS222, when the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a design designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

At step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Further, after the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect, and a hold display after the specific display start effect ends. and a specific display as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display A specific display for executing a rotation display effect (see FIGS. 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)) Rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-reading notice in the feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect ends. Until then, a start lamp light emission effect execution process (step 135SG165) is executed for executing the start lamp light emission effect of causing the start lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory. Then, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the design designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the design designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 10% of the time, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be lost is highest when the target is the highest (expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251). Whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. It should be judged by whether.

When the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) is determined (step 135SGS252). If no starting winning designation command is received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is subject to the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display start effect (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution processing. .

Further, when the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (the process for the specific display start effect A). The value of the timer or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (the process timer for specific display start effect being executed) that is decremented by 1 times out. (Step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed does not time out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed (step 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect being executed times out (step 135 SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (step 135 SGS263). When the final specific display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is ended. If the last process timer for specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display start effect process timer is started, and the next specific display start effect is executed. The effect device is controlled (steps 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, and step 135SGS266) in accordance with the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer, and the specific display start effect execution process ends.

As described above, in the present characterizing portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is determined based on the starting prize not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect), or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display start effect A. .

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is, as the specific display rotation display effect described above, similar to the other suspended displays and active displays, in the active display area 135SG005A or the suspended storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U. Transition to rotation animation display.

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), as the specific display start effect B, first, an image An animation in which the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at winning is displayed on the display device 5 . After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold display is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display start effect B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. . After the end of the specific display start effect B, the reserved display shifts to a rotating animation display in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect, like the other reserved displays and active displays.

Incidentally, when the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the starting prize, as in FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the animation ends. to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the target of the flash effect at the time of winning of the relevant entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (Step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (Step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds after the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Also, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be repeatedly output. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as a sound corresponding to the notice effect and a sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effects has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last period has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect of the target variable display super reach. Flashing is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and the silhouette image of the character A imitated by the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning in the image display device 5. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit white or red light in the same manner as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower luminance than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 10-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period of the prize is started, and the process timer of the process data 1 is started. Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not the flash effect object flag at the time of winning of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is the variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command has been received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices that it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the determination result. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 135SG is a dialogue effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decoration design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device when executing the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of variable display, and it is determined to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. FIG. 10-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, execution of the winning flash effect is determined, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

10-29 to 10-48 "When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined", the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and the "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (Fig. 10-32 (G) and Fig. 10- 32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-32 (G), and 10-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-32(H), 10-33(I), and 10-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(H) and 10-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K) and 10-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(K) to 10-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-40(W) and 10-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-45(g) to 10-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-46 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-45(g) and 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48 (m) and 10-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emitting effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice production) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. Appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (previous flash effect at the time of winning) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 10-19 (B-1) to Fig. 10-19 ( B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the win-time flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 10-29 to 10-29). 10-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-52 (G), and 10-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). In addition, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-52(H), 10-53(I), and 10-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(H) and 10-53(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-53 (J), 10-54 (K) and 10-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-54(K) to 10-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 , the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-65(g) to 10-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 10-65(g) and 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-68 (m) and 10-68 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light (lighting at the brightness C1) according to the ready-to-win effect, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. . Incidentally, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the feature part 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means of the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means of the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the second winning flash effect execution period. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize is generated during variable display, whether or not the winning flash effect is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, a display pattern α to a display pattern γ (of a pending display notice effect) is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as a specific display start effect A or a specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), rotating display of the active display as a specific display rotating display effect is executed, and the winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) are executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the specific display start effect is suspended. 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), 10-49(B) to 10- As shown in 50 (D), it is displayed as a pending display and a rotation animation, and as shown in FIGS. Since the spinning animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when the specific display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, flash effect at the time of winning Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), even when the specific display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in -50 (D), the win-time flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, so the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Also, since the winning flash performance can be started before the specific display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once extinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame When the lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, the luminance is C3, which is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the prize winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at low brightness, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effects can be executed depending on whether or not they are being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effects during execution of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A) ~ Figure 10-32 (H), Figure 10-49 (A) ~ Figure 10-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When the execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term, the flash at the time of prize is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a luminance C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a luminance C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the latter winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific form with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and making the game interesting. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in the interest in the game has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the other effect at the time of the winning. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the symbol fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention has been exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce discomfort when blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incompatibility at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different degrees of expectation for big hits. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L, 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71(C), and 10-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display of the pending display of is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in this modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (Fig. 10-73 (G) and Fig. 10-73(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the second stage The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the flashing of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75(K) to 10-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the winning flash effect sound from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the late winning time is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Fig. 10-81 ( W) In this variation 135SG-1, the decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as a flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 10-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display that is out of normal reach is completed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-86(g) to 10-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-89 (m) and 10-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-69, when a starting prize is generated during execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the starting prize, the start lamp light emission effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in this modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on for the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Further, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the lighting for the flash for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during the execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 again selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of sound corresponding to winning flash effect, emission of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 10-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effects of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a production position (for example, a central front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and flash production at the time of winning. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-93(E) to 10-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (A) and FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A), 10-98(O) and 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-101(E) to 10-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. 10-104 (K) to 10-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive rendering ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-90(B) and FIGS. 10-106(O) to 10-106(P), the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion rendering appears , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to movable body motion effects at volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 10-90(B), 10-107(Q) and 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts super reach. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished according to the execution of , and thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on according to the execution of the movable body action effect (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-108(B), 10-114(A) to 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the win-time flash effect is being executed. At this time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, so the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed in stages. The prize winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during execution of the prize winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the period T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a mode corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the position above the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be informed that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which of the light emission modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the start timing of the action presentation, and the ready-to-win presentation is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and at a rate of 70%, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since there is a case where the ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, the game determines whether the end timing of the winning flash effect is during the moving body action effect or during the super-ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the light emission mode and the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect or the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body motion. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may stop flashing when winning due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (holding display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white circle, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the degree of expectation for the big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for the big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided as the pending display and the active display pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. The display pattern α may be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, the characterizing section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display notice effect (a display pattern β or a display pattern β for displaying a pending display or an active display) and the display pattern as a determination of execution of a winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an effect rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, as the effect effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and an effect that differs in the effect mode from the first effect effect effect A second action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action effect is executed as the first effect effect or the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for execution in action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to attract attention, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may act on other characters, and as a result of the action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the variable display is in progress, the first start opening wins When (start winning) occurs and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. , and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character (see FIG. 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), the When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D In the case of moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display which is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friend character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to be displayed. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the friend character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display, the display pattern .delta. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed with the display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is displayed. When the display pattern ε is used, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 10-20) or the period when the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is the specific display start as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form of displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with blinking of the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect for the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at the volume V2. , Blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), game effect lamp 9 except stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y with brightness C2 and blinking with cycle T2 (Fig. 10- 27(A) to FIG. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-128 (J), 10-129 (K) and 10-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second variant 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-129(K) and 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-130 (M) and 10-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays a combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M indicating a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting surprise to the player.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, but in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 10-40, etc.) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol stops in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modified example 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize from being lowered due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are performed. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set when the starting winning occurs. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when executing the winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased so that the display on the image display device 5 is relatively displayed. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the win-win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the latter stage, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is used for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 is temporarily executed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It is executable, and the change in the lighting mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving body operation before reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 10-90 to 10-107), step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when step-up effect is executed when winning flash effect is not executed, winning flash effect While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 10-108 to 10-118), which does not change the light emission mode according to the response, can execute the movable body operation effect before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on whether the lighting mode changes (Modification 135SG-4, Fig. 10-119). Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern is changed from the display pattern ε according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG-6, FIGS. 10-121 to 10-123), silhouette image displayed on the image display device 5 according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG005S in which the display mode changes (modification 135SG-7, FIGS. 10-124 to 10-130), etc. are disclosed, but the pachinko machine of the present invention has these plural characteristic parts and modifications Any combination of two or more features or variations from the examples may be implemented.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game is at least the predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. (For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)),
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. A portion that can determine whether to execute a notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed), and a game machine.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Further, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, according to the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and to adjust the speed at which the game value is given (for example, change pattern selection). When the adjustment to make the variable display time longer than the case where the game value imparting speed is not reduced) is executed, an effect is performed according to the adjustment, so excessive game value is imparted in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest while preventing the In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which, when installed in a game arcade, easily attracts the interest of the players with its presentation that is easy for the players to understand and its moderate gambling nature.

Also, the adjustment means and the light emission mode may be associated with each other. For example, a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) may be more likely to be displayed when the game ground is given at a higher speed than when it is given at a slower speed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the normal state and the advantageous state rather than the normal state. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high-probability base state or low-probability base state)) that is easily controlled,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part) game machine that can decide whether to execute the notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). 12-13) and the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Sometimes, an adjusting means for adjusting the speed at which game values are awarded in a unit period is reduced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 and A part for extending the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the state flag value to '1' or '2',
The update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the termination condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the variable display remaining count after judgment that was set to "1" as well becomes 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing due to the addition of game value.

The gaming machine of form 2 of characterizing portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The adjusting means is configured such that a variable display period of variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is a variable display period of variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust to be longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is “1” or “2” (first high ball output state or second When it is in a high ball output state), the special figure variable display time in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (when it is in a low ball output state) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the length of the variable display period makes it possible to lengthen the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. The game value imparting speed can be reduced without reducing the game value imparted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 3 of characterizing portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The advantageous state includes a grantable period during which game value can be granted (for example, the period of each round game in which the big winning opening is open as shown in FIG. 12-20) and a grant during which game value cannot be granted. Impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, fanfare production period, interval period, ending production period in which the big winning opening is closed),
The adjusting means adjusts the advantageous state grant disable period controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value and the advantageous state controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Fig. 12-21, if the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball output status flag is A part where the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than in the case of "0"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the non-granting period during which the game value is not granted is lengthened, so that the speed of granting the game value when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 4 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Which of the first advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win B) and the second advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win A) in which the game value given is larger than the first advantageous state is the advantageous state? Advantageous state type determination means (for example, CPU 103 executes the process (step 162 SGS154) for determining the jackpot type in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 12-16),
The adjusting means adjusts the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, and the predetermined numerical data is the first value. When the rate is higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-1, the ball output state is a high ball output state In this case, the part that lowers the determination ratio of the variable probability big hit A as the jackpot type and increases the determination ratio of the variable probability big hit B than when the ball output state is the low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the first advantageous state in which the game value to be awarded is small is likely to be determined, so the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value to be given can be reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the speed of giving the game value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 5 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
When the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjusting means adjusts the rate at which the advantageous period end determining means determines the end of the advantageous period when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. is adjusted to be higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determination means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-2, the high-ball output state has a higher jackpot than the low-ball output state. A part that increases the percentage of determining the type to be a non-variable jackpot, and a part that increases the percentage of winning a falling lottery in a high-ball state than in a low-ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is easy to determine the end of the advantageous period, and it is easy to control to the normal state, so that the advantageous state continues through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 6 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state occurring during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means reaches the number of termination determinations. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-3, the first high-ball output condition is that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high-ball output state or the second high-ball output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball state to the low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the end determination count occurs in the advantageous period.

The gaming machine of form 7 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The end condition is that the number of times of variable display executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means reaches the number of times of end determination (for example, after determination "100", which is the value set as the remaining number of variable displays, becomes "0" by executing the variable display 100 times);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the end determination count is variably displayed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of form 8 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of termination determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means. (For example, as shown in modification 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1", during the period of the continuous state state A part that sets the value of the output ball status flag to "0" based on the total number of game balls entering reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of the termination determination. can do.

The gaming machine of form 9 of characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the game machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 12-11). When executing the game control main process shown, (step S3; N), based on the fact that the restoration condition is not established, the part that executes the processing of step S6a and step S6b),
with
When the memory contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the CPU 103 The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball output state is set as the value of the ball output state flag in the processing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of form 10 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A storage means (for example, a RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 12). When executing the game control main processing shown in -11, if the restoration condition is established (step S3; Y), execute the restoration processing (step S4) including the update processing of the ball output state flag by the backup data. If it was in a high ball output state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a high ball output state, and if it was in a low ball state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued when the power failure is restored.

The gaming machine of form 11 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
Informing means capable of informing that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the CPU 103 ball-out state determination processing, the ball-out state flag is set in step S162SG06). After setting the value to "1", in the process of step 162SG08, the part that starts lighting the high-ball status notification LED 162SG071)
It is characterized by
It can be recognized that the adjustment is being performed by the predetermined numerical data being the second value.

The gaming machine of form 12 of characterizing portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to form 11,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A plurality of light emitting units whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (e.g., first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, high output ball state notification LED 162SG071) light emitting means having and
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, the part that notifies the high-ball state by lighting the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform notification by light emission control common to other light emission units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of form 13 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 14 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can suggest that the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, and a notice effect (for example, pre-reading notice effect) that foretells the execution of the specific effect. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The effect executing means limits execution of the advance notice effect during a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 12- 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-determination variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count in the processing of step 162 SGS 242b of the pre-reading notice setting processing. If it is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit number of times (step 162 SGS242b; Y), the portion where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the adjustment not being executed due to the update of the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 109SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

A conventional game machine, as a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), can notify the effect result by the operation of the movable body (execution of the specific effect), and can output the effect sound. Some have a speaker (sound output means).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period before executing the specific effect, and the suggesting effect. It is conceivable to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Furthermore, in such a game machine, the repetitive motion of the movable body as the suggestive effect is terminated a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of effect sound output from the speaker is changed before and after the predetermined period ( It is conceivable to improve the amusement of the game by changing the type of the effect sound output from the speaker. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to be recognized by the movement of the movable body.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that makes it easy to recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic portion 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 11-3(A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction. , the third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third moving body unit 109SG400. and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the characteristic part 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Among the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421 to move to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5. (See FIG. 11-3(A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 11-3(B)), the presentation above the suggested position and the front position of the image display device 5 It is movable to the position (see FIG. 11-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423 to move to the retracted position (FIG. 11) which is the lower position of the image display device 5. -3 (A)) to the left and right proximity positions (see FIG. 11-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all at the retracted position. The position state is the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the right and left close positions is defined as the third state.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number value for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 11-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this characteristic portion 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present characteristic unit 109SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 109SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 109SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 109SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and the "non-probability variable big win" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probability variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic portion 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 109SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 109SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from these random values for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic part 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β2 big hit variation pattern).

Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern) and PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) Determine from

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B, while the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, PB1-2, PB1 -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are assigned different numbers of determination values. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 2 in PB1-1, 45 in PB1-2, 150 in PB1-3, 300 in PB1-4, and 500 in PB1-5 values are assigned to each. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, there are two determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. assigned to each. That is, in the characteristic portion 109SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern PB1-4 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable big hit. Alternatively, since PB1-5 is determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α1), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach α2) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β1) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2).

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 109SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 to 11-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 109SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 It is a variable display for executing a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9, as the jackpot expectations of each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG, the jackpot expectations of super reach β2 are set to be the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set in order of high expectations for big hits (Expectations for big hits in each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG: Super Reach β2>Super Reach β1>Super Reach α2>Super Reach α1 > normal reach > non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of super reach, this characteristic portion 109SG determines whether the friend character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of super reach) is friend character A or friend character B. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the combination of which of the enemy character A and B the enemy character displayed as the ready-to-win effect is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIGS. is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 11-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 109SG191, the production control timer setting unit 109SG192, the production control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the characteristic unit 109SG, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 109SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" ( step 109 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" ( step 109 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 109 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 109SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 109SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 109 SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 11-12), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 109 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of the machine 1 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 109 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 109SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 109 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the event (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 109 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 109 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic unit 109SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of retained memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 109SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 109 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 109 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Go to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random number MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 11-14 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109 SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command at step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

At step 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), in step 109SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the empty space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and return to the processing of step 109SGS221.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 109SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characterizing portion 162SGS234, when the received command is the first ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the low ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "0". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the second ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the third ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the second high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "2". set (updated) to

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 109SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and there is no pending memory (entry) in which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). If there is no pending memory where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is pending storage where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach performance is being executed (step 109 SGS242b).

Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. is 2, it is sufficient to refer to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed and determine whether or not the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry not set is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109 SGS243a). When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a win or a big hit. If it is a design designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the design designation command stored in the entry is the first design designation command (design designation command indicating failure) (step 109SGS243b). .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109 SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109 SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, prefetching at the time of the jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 109 SGS245).

In step 109 SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (the notice type) are determined at the decision ratios shown in FIGS. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109 SGS244, the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (forecast type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set too high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is always determined to display the pending memory display in a white square (◇) or a white star. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable Similar to the case where the display result is "missing", a case may be provided in which it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Also, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command that indicates a loss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 109 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it specifies that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 109SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect judgment table (step 109 SGS248).

In step 109 SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at the decision ratios shown in FIGS. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 109 SGS247, the presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed. there is

Specifically, two types of display patterns (preliminary notice types), that is, a display pattern α and a display pattern β are provided. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "not The rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher than in the case of "ready to reach". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variation pattern category when the variable display result is "mismatch".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big win (probable variable big win)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit". Since the ratio of the number of times when the number of times is increased increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 109SGS249).

After step 109SGS245 is executed or when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, in step 109SGS249, if execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), go to step 109SGS252.

Also, as described above, during execution of the reach effect of super reach (step 109SGS242b; Y), or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry of the entry After setting the pending display flag to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 109SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the starting winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, the display shown in FIG. As shown, the reserved display of the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display form of "O" as shown in FIGS. 11-17. , When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", the display mode of "☆" is displayed. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is two, for example, as shown in FIGS. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is displayed in the display mode where the reserved memory display of 1 is "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Is displayed. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (screen center).

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 109SG, the form of executing the processing of step 109SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in step 109SG242, the characterizing section 109SG determines execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the starting winning on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored reserved memory and the newly stored reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, but this invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

11-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109 SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). Also, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and every time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 stores image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, in the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 109 SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), the movable body control timer is set to the second time (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 operates the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

After step 109SGS288 is executed, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109 SGS286).

FIG. 11-19 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After step 109SGS303c is executed, or if it is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

At step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109 SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processing of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i is executed. without proceeding to step 109 SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapse of time is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109 SGS311). In this manner, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109 SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 109 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 109 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 109 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the characteristic portion 109SG will be described. Rendering modes of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, for the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2, when the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2 are started, the first enlarged display period is started. , Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period If there is, ally character A and enemy character B) are enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1 time) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed up to the magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 at a constant speed. After the end of the third enlarged display period, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has passed. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, among the differences between the display magnifications, the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the slowest during the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, “fast enlargement speed” means that the image enlargement rate per unit time is high.

Thereafter, in this characteristic portion 109SG, a period T2 is a period (a period during which the movable body action suggestive effect is executed) combining the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above, and the third enlarged display period and the character image are displayed. A period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the As an effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-22, during the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Henceforth, in this characterizing part 109SG, the period during which the movable body effect A and the deviation notification effect are executed may be referred to as a period T4. Among these periods T2 to T4, the period T3 is the shortest period and the period T4 is the longest period (the length of the periods T2 to T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the ready-to-reach performances of super reach α1 and super reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body A movable body motion suggesting production A is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1.

Furthermore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4 as part of the above-described movable body motion presentation A. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5 . Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body action effect A in the characterizing part 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body action suggestive effect A.

Further, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is in the middle of the above-described period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and period T3 (more precisely is the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period), the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1 over a period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R: BGM such as music, SE (sound effect), action suggestive sound, and big hit notification sound. , and the type of sound output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the BGM is the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win effect is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, SE (sound effect) is a dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the SE output in the ready-to-win effect is performed throughout the ready-to-win effect.

The motion suggestive sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestive production A. That is, the action suggesting sound is output only during the period T2 during which the movable body action suggesting effect A is executed, and is not output during the other periods. The big hit notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion presentation A. In other words, the big hit notification sound is output only during the period T4 during which the movable body action effect A is executed when the variable display result is a big win, and is not output during the other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, when the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period and the second Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of super reach β1, friendly character B and enemy character A; Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

Fig. 11- for the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, the lighting mode of the movable body LED 109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestive sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. 21 and FIGS. 11-22, the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is the same as the variable display, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-23, during the reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable As an effect informing that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their retracted positions. A movable body action effect B to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-24, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable object effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4, like the movable object effect A and the failure notification effect described above.

Also, during the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion suggesting effect B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggesting effect B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the action suggesting effect is executed, the movable body action suggesting effect is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the image enlargement ratio per unit time is large), and the character image enlargement rate is the highest in the first enlarged display period. During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-26(A), when the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggesting effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. does not move, whereas the movable body motion suggesting effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggestive position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(B), comparing the movable body action effect A and the movable body action effect B, the movable body action effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the effected position to the approach position of the first movable body. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at the speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion presentation A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super-to-win α1, super-to-win α2, super-to-win β1, and super-reach to β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-27 to 11-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (A) and 11-27 (B), after a while from the start of variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "right" decorative design display area 5R are stopped in a combination indicating reach. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of reach, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIG. 11-27 (C ) and FIG. 11-28(A)), if the variable display is the super reach α2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27(D) and 11-28(A)). FIG. 11-30 (A)), if the variable display is the super reach β1 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (E) and 11 -32 (A)), if the variable display is a super reach β2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (F) and 11- 34(A)).

At the start of the ready-to-win performance of these super ready-to-win, the decorative symbols displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative patterns become temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), in the second half of the battle production, which is the reach production of super reach α1, as shown in FIG. Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(C) to 11-28(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-28(D) to 11-28(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character A are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-28 (A) to 11-28 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character A with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(E) to 11-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 for a predetermined period of time. to display. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-29(H) and 11-29(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, a friendly character A and an enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as a movable body motion effect A. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach α2 is approaching, it is shown in FIG. 11-30 (C). Thus, display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-30(C) to 11-30(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-30(D) to 11-30(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character B are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character B with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-31(G) to 11-31(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. An effect image 109SG005B of an explosion is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as a reach production of super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C) At this time, display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(C) to 11-32(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by a close-range attack, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(D) and 11-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33(G) to 11-33(I), when the result of the variable display is a big win, the player character B and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as the reach production of super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (C) At that time, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(C) to 11-34(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(D) and 11-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-35(G) to 11-35(I), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the player character B is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. and an explosion effect image 109SG005B overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. A model effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is informed that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and then stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion production B, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 11-35. On the other hand, during execution of the movable body motion effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, so that the display of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion enlarges the image of the friend character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since it is possible to make the display and the effect motion of the movable body motion effect B by the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) more conspicuous, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the enlargement speed of each character's image differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the motion speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion presentation can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the enlargement speed is slower in the second enlargement display period than in the first enlargement display period, and the third enlargement display period is Since the enlargement speed is slower than that of the second enlargement display period, the enlargement display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggesting effect is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed is the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the enlargement speed is the slowest during the third enlargement display period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement speed may be the fastest in the third enlargement display period, the enlargement speed in the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed in the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the ready-to-win effect including the enlarged display period. It is possible to prevent the attention of the In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, a mode is exemplified in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice The period during which the execution of the effect is restricted may be only part of the ready-to-win effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in the feature part 109SG, as a mode for restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, a form in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-reading forewarning effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35 Furthermore, during execution of the movable body action effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, thereby reducing the visibility of the ready-to-win effect. In other words, since the visibility of the effect image of the reach effect (images of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the action status of the first movable body 109SG401, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 can be used as the effect suggesting the action of the movable body. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion rendering, and it is possible to adjust the attention degree of the first movable body 109SG401 and the ready-to-win rendering rendering image.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, SE, and action suggestive sound, while executing the movable body motion presentation. During the middle, BGM, SE, and a jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable object action effect, the output from the speakers 8L, 8R is performed. The player can easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the period T3 is a period longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Since the period T3 is a period shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body action suggestion effect is executed, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect is the same as the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as , and increase the interest in the game by making the movable body motion suggestion performance execution period longer than the movable body motion performance execution period in the suggested ready-to-win performance. decline can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect, the movable body LED 109SG495 is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35, the movable body In the action effect B, since all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated, it is possible to determine whether the action of the movable body is a motion suggesting the action of the movable body or the effect of the action of the movable body. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether or not the action is also an action.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1, and the movable body motion presentation is performed. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action presentation is being executed by the luminance of the movable body LED 109SG495. , the amusement of the game can also be improved during execution of the movable body motion presentation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-30, during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, and other ready-to-reach effects are displayed. Effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, during execution of movable body action suggestive effect A, effect image of reach effect. , the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made conspicuous, and the movement of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S appear on the image display device 5 at a speed V2, which is higher than the speed V1. is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made conspicuous in the movable body motion presentation A, and these Since the movement of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(F) and 11-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same. , the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the start timing of enlarged display of the effect image (image of the friend character and the enemy character) of the ready-to-win effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect is set to be earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect is performed. player's attention.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is substantially the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (the display magnification is slightly different). only), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5 , an effect image, or the like may be displayed so that the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period is different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the ready-to-win effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays the The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the motion of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion may differ from that of the effect image according to the progress of the battle production. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the motion of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, so that the game interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, the effect of the explosion corresponding to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production may be varied. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the action of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the period from the end of the movable body action suggestive effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body action effect or the failure notification effect, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggesting effect and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion effect or failure notification is given. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let Furthermore, when executing the movable body action effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), by setting the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, The visibility of the friend character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5. , during execution of the movable body presentation, it is possible to increase attention to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect is more than the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. can be increased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect can be improved. .

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the movable body motion suggestion corresponding image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion effect is being executed. As the body action effect corresponding image, an image different from the movable body action suggesting effect corresponding image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect are set to can be different. By doing so, the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are combined with the motions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). or execution of movable body action presentation).

Furthermore, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body action effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be reduced by reducing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body action effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movable body action effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect, the image display device 5 outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect from the speaker 8L8R. When the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed in , the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be output from the speaker 8L8R. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the movable body action suggestive presentation and the movable body action presentation are executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggesting presentation or the movable body motion presentation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can be operated on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. Display of the image corresponding to the body action effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the start of the movable body action presentation during the ready-to-win presentation of super ready-to-win, and to increase the player's attention to the movable body action presentation.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, in the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the form in which the display that moves at the speed V1 is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range It may be variable. In this case, for example, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to is changed to a lower speed (the speed V1 is changed to a lower speed) as it approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggesting effect A is executed, the movement speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the game interest. can.

In addition, the characterizing section 109SG outputs one action suggesting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, and one loudspeaker notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion presentation presentation. Although the mode of outputting sound has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action-indicating sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to output a plurality of sounds as the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the suggestive sound or the jackpot notification sound is started to be output. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestive effect or the movable body action effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound can be output according to the output timing. Since the action-indicating sound and the big-hit notification sound are changed by pressing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the output timing of the action-indicative sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the action-indicating sound is started, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be decided at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, the interest in the game can be improved.

11-21 to 11-24, the first movable body 109SG401 moves at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at positions near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401 from being out of step.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 waits at the retracted position until the movable body action effect or the deviation notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the suggesting position until the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect is started. good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion presentation is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the presentation position, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggesting position after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the player's expectation for execution of the movable body action effect can be aroused.

11-21 to 11-24, in the characterizing part 109SG, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased when the movable body action suggesting effect is executed and when the movable body action effect is executed. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

11-20, the characteristic unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are executed based on the respective control timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body In addition to the movement control of , lighting control of LEDs provided in the pachinko game machine 1, output control of effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like may be executed based on respective dedicated control timers.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, the effect control The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (performs S73 to S77 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), and performs update control of the effect image every 33 ms, movement control of the movable body every 1 ms, and LED lighting control is executed every 10 ms, and effect sound output control is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the performance image update control, LED lighting control, and performance sound output control are executed, movement control of the movable body (first movable body motor 109SG421, second movable body motor 109SG422, third movable body motor 109SG422, drive control of the motor 109SG423) are executed together, movement control of the movable body, effect image update control, LED lighting control, and effect sound output control can be preferably executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, the form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emitting modes. It is also possible to vary the ratio of control to the big win game state according to the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S on the image display device 5 was exemplified as the movable body motion suggesting effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestive effect A are provided, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in one of the modes as the movable body motion suggestive effect A. Depending on the number, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be varied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-25, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the third enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion presentation). Although a mode in which the execution is not performed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is performed even during the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, when the variable display result is a big hit, the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 can be executed during the third enlarged display period, thereby enabling the third enlarged display. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. (Movable body motion suggestive effect B) to suggest execution of movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these Execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in a mode other than the display of the image of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic portion 109SG, the lighting and blinking period of the LED, the lighting color, etc., can be used to produce a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion. Execution of production B may be suggested.

11-28 and 11-30, in the characterizing portion 109SG, the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body action suggestion effect A. 11-28 (D) and 11-30 (D)), but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the movable body action suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 11-28 (C) or the timing of FIG. 11-30(C)).

When the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started before the contrast between the images of friend character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is lowered in the image display device 5 as described above, By increasing the degree of transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

11-29(G) and the like, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action presentation is executed, and is displayed on the image display device 5. Although a part of the effect image that is displayed is rendered invisible by the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect image 109SG005B of the explosion or an image dedicated to the movable body action effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, and all other effect images may be made invisible.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of executing the movable body motion effect during the ready-to-win effect of super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is A timing other than during the reach performance of the super reach may be used. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A), 11-36 (B) and FIGS. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from reaching reach to the start timing of the reach effect of super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-36(B), the movable body motion suggesting effect is first started after reaching the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win effect to be executed after this is highly expected (big hit). The ratio of being controlled to the game state is high) reach production (for example, reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic part 109SG) and low expectation (jackpot game state ) reach effect (for example, the reach effect with a lower expectation than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic portion 109SG) As a branching effect for informing whether to branch to or not, the branching effect for displaying an image of a character with eyes closed is shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without opening the eyes of the character. That is, in the branching effect, the characters displayed on the image display device 5 turn dark without opening their eyes, so that the ready-to-win effect with high expectations is not executed (the ready-to-win effect with low expectations is executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branch effect is finished), the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. It is reported that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character opening his/her eyes. In addition, at this time, a movable body motion presentation is also executed. After the movable body action effect and the branch effect are finished, the ready-to-reach effect with high expectation is executed.

In other words, the movable body action effect may be executed as an effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a big win as illustrated in the characteristic portion 109SG, but it notifies that the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed. You may perform as production|presentation (production|production which alert|reports that the expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state is high).

In this modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36(B) and 11-37(C), the image display device 5 gradually enlarges and displays the character whose eyes are closed as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as concentration lines, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, an example of applying the present invention as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit was illustrated, but in this modification 109SG-8 As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch as to which of the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation and the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is the image of the character (the first specific image is the image of the character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is the image of the character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. corresponds to the image such as the above-described saturated lines.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as a effect for notifying that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed, Although a mode in which the movable body action suggesting effect is executed before the movable body action effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggesting effect may not be executed. Further, the execution ratio of the movable body motion presentation may be different between when the movable body motion suggestive presentation is executed and when it is not performed (the rate at which the ready-to-win performance with high expectation is executed is different). (Description of Characteristic Portion 162SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration described above, and the same configuration denoted by the same reference numeral as the basic configuration is described here. Description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG different from the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

FIG. 12-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the predetermined A variable display time extension (to be described later) for adjusting the number of game balls to be paid out (given to the player) in a unit period in response to determination as being in a high-ball state at the lower left position of the game area, which is a position. A high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying by lighting that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and the main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) executes a ball output state determination process (see FIGS. 12-13), which will be described later, to control lighting/extinguishing. The control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 is the same cycle.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball output state by lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071. can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 12-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-2(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is a "loss" or a "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a payout state designation command for designating the determination status of the payout state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As shown in FIG. 12-2(C), different EXT data are set in the payout state specifying command according to the judgment status of the payout state judgment. As a specific example, the command 9600H is set as a ball output state 1 designation command corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined as a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is set so that the number of consecutive jackpots is the first determination number (5 times) and less than the second determination count (10 times), and the command 9602H is set as a command 9602H corresponding to the determination state that is determined as the first high ball output state that is less than the second determination count (10 times). A command for designating the ball output state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined as the second high ball output state that is the number of times of 2 determination (10 times) or more.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment consecutive game count, which is the number of times the jackpot state occurred in the high-ball game state determined after being judged as the high-ball game state, and corresponds to the post-determination consecutive game count. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state) executed after being judged as the high ball state. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the number of display remaining times, the post-determination variable display remaining number of times is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of judgment at the time of winning, the judgment result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 12-2(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-3, in this characteristic portion 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 12-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this characteristic part 162SG, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is referred to for determining based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. table.

In the display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), a special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 162SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state. is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that

FIG. 12-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small winning" is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 162SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), special figures A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small win".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the characterizing portion 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small win" differs between the special game of the first special figure and the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 162SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this characterizing portion 162SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 162SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 12-6) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first jackpot (first hit), and the jackpot that occurred in the time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) It may be described as a shoatari). In addition, the period of the big hit state and the high base state from when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called a continuous period (advantageous period). In this characteristic part 162SG, even if the variable probability big hit C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the big win, so the variable probability big win C is not treated as the first big win (first hit), and the big hit is made in the variable probability state after the variable probability big win C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variable jackpot C is regarded as the first jackpot (first hit). The subsequent period of the high-probability-low base state may also be included in the consecutive period (advantageous period).

In addition, although not implemented in this characteristic part 162SG, instead of the probability variable jackpot C, the game state after the jackpot may be provided with a sudden time-saving jackpot in which the game state is a low probability high base state. Suddenly, the short-time jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving pattern (for example, a stop pattern of 137 or a stop pattern dedicated to time-saving not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern, a round game for opening the special variable winning ball device 7 is executed. In the case of direct control from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the continuous period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that. is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 12-6 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 162SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 162SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from these random values for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 162SG. In this characterizing section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-7, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-7, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the characteristic portion 162SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern) and PA2-2 (super reach fluctuation pattern) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Use the fluctuation pattern determination table C to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach out) and PA2-2 (super reach out of fluctuation pattern) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 162SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Next, the relationship between the variation pattern and the ball output state will be described with reference to FIG. 12-8. The ball output state flag in FIG. 12-8 is a flag updated by the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. This is a flag which is set to "1" in the case of the high payout state and "2" in the case of the second high payout state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low-ball-out state, a first high-ball-out state, or a second high-ball-out state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. The variable display time corresponding to the state flag set to "0" is not extended, but the variation pattern corresponding to the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is variable. The display time is a variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with a high appearance frequency, and the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1- When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern in 4) is set and extended, and the ball output state flag is set to "1", these extended variable display times are not changed. By executing the out-of-reach variable display, the average variable display time is lengthened.

In addition, the variable display time of the variation pattern corresponding to the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2" is the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency and the normal reach. Loss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) variable display time of the variation pattern, non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach loss ( PA2-1) and the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and when the ball output state flag is set to "2", these are extended. The average variable display time is further lengthened by executing the variable display of the non-reach loss, normal reach loss, and normal reach jackpot of the variable display time.

These extended variable display times are 1 second in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is "1" with respect to non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-shortened variation pattern. It is 1.5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2". is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", and 1.0 second in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "1", and in the second high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

It should be noted that the length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 12-8 is an example, and the length of the variable display time may be extended differently from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 12-8, by extending the variation pattern of non-reach loss, which has a high execution frequency due to the high determination ratio, and the variation pattern of normal reach, which has a high execution frequency compared to super reach, In addition to efficiently lengthening the average variable display time, the data capacity can be reduced by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time for reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to effects due to the long variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns. The variable display time may be uniformly added and extended, and a common presentation using common presentation data may be executed in each variation pattern during the extended period.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", only the variation pattern of non-reach deviation is extended, and when the ball output state flag is "2" By increasing the variation pattern to be extended in the second high ball output state so that the reach variation pattern is also extended when a certain second high ball output state is reached, the average variable display time is further increased. Although the extension is made to be efficient, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to prevent the control load associated with the extension from excessively increasing by extending only the extension further and preventing the variation pattern of the extension target from changing according to the ball output state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, not only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, but also the fluctuation pattern described later In order to cope with the case where the continuous game period (advantageous period) is over and the game is controlled to the normal state and then a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times, the continuous game period (advantageous period) is finished. In order to extend the variable display in the normal state when the It is not limited to this, and only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, may be extended. .

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 162SG, there is a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 12-9 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 162SG153, a game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 162SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 162SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-described ball-out state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 162SG191, a production control timer setting unit 162SG192, a production control counter setting unit 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the startup winning command buffer 162SG194A of the characterizing portion 162SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 9). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 162SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 12-22), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variation category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

12-10(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, based on FIG. 12-11, the game control main processing of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-11, even in the game control main process of this feature part 162SG, substantially the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4 is executed, but the feature of the game control main process of this feature part 162SG The point is that the contents of the recovery process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, the process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball output state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the characteristic part 162SG, the process of recovering the ball output state flag to the state before the power interruption is executed. In addition, as will be described later, in the power interruption processing of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature part 162SG shown in FIG. It contains the data of the flag value of the ball output state flag at the time.

As a specific recovery state of the ball payout state flag, when the value of the ball payout state flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball payout state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "1" by the recovery process, and when the power failure occurs When the value of the paid-out state flag is "2" corresponding to the second paid-out state, the recovery processing sets the put-out state flag to "2". That is, by the recovery processing of S4, the value of the ball payout state flag is set to the value before the power failure, and the ball payout state before the power failure is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the post-judgment number of consecutive residences and the post-judgment variable display remaining number, which will be described later. The data at the time of power failure is restored by the restoration process.

In this way, the value of the ball-out status flag is restored to the value before the power outage by the recovery processing in step S4, and the data of the number of consecutive games after determination and the number of variable display remaining times after determination are restored. Even if a power failure occurs in the first ball delivery state or the second ball delivery state in which the ball delivery speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball delivery speed is not terminated by the power failure, and the power failure is restored. is also continued.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) is executed when the power is turned on. Afterwards, the ball payout state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball payout state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied (when the power supply is started other than the power failure recovery), the value "0" corresponding to the low ball payout status is set to the ball payout status flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inappropriate adjustment of the ball delivery speed when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 12-12, the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. The game control timer interrupt process of this characterizing portion 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration , differs in that it has power-off processing in step S19 omitted and ball-out state determination processing, which is a characteristic point of the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG.

In the power-off process in step S19, it is detected whether or not a power-off signal has been output from the power supply substrate 17 (whether or not the power supply has been turned on). The power-off signal is a signal that is output when, for example, a power monitor circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that the power-off signal is output, as described above, the state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-described ball output state flag, etc., which are necessary for restoring the state at the time of the power failure. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power-off signal has been output, the power-off processing is terminated. After executing the ball output state determination process of step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball output state determination processing in step S20 of the characteristic portion 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-13(a). FIG. 12-13(a) is a flow chart showing an example of the contents of the ball-out state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is the low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether it is the state or the second high-ball state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is the first judgment number of "5" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). If it is not equal to or greater than the first judgment number of "5", that is, if it is not in the state of consecutive residences or if it is in the state of consecutive residences but the number of times of consecutive residences is less than 5 (step 162SGS02; N), The ball output state determination processing is ended. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5" (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10". Determine (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive games is not equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive games reaches "5" which is the first judgment number of times, the first ball is put out. 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 12-13(b) (step 162SGS07 ). As will be described later, the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process. Therefore, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive games is a jackpot for which the adjustment for the extension of the jackpot period is not executed in the first stage. The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpots of the 6th to 10th times of consecutive games.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare effect period at the start of the jackpot state, which is a period in which the special variable prize ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not opened, and the end of the round game. to the start of the next round game, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0", so that the same number of game balls By extending the period of the jackpot game in which is paid out, the number of game balls paid out per unit time is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, the extension length of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period is set to be longer than the first high ball payout state in which the ball payout state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state in which the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is , the extension length is relatively short first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, the jackpot period extension adjustment of the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2", the extension length is relatively It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is started to start notification that the high-ball state has been reached (step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high-ball state is determined is a predetermined number. The post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (100) for specifying the remaining number of times until reaching 100 times is set, and the number of consecutive hits that occurred after being judged as a high-ball state is set. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, a form in which the predetermined number of times is 100 times is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive residences reaches the second judgment number of "10", the second ball is put out. It was determined that the state was established, and the ball output state flag was set to "2" corresponding to the second ball output state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment was started as shown in Fig. 12-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), go to step 162SGS17. Since the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process as will be described later, the second-stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive game.

Also, if the value of the ball output status flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the number of termination determinations for ending the adjustment, In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences after determination has reached 10, which is the end determination number (step 162SGS10). In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, the number of times of end determination is exemplified as 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers are determined according to specifications such as the probability of a big hit and the continuation rate of a big hit. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number (step 162 SGS10; N), that is, after the number of times of consecutive games is 5 times or more and it is determined to be a high-ball state, the state of consecutive games will be changed. When the number of consecutive game jackpots generated without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the game state is a low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive game state is finished. (Step 162SGS11) If the gaming state is the low base state (Step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to Step 162SGS13. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is reset when the consecutive residence state ends and the low base state is entered.

On the other hand, if the post-determination number of consecutive residences is not 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; N), or the post-determination number of consecutive residences is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; Y). If the game state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the post-judgment variable display remaining number is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, the variable display of 100 times, which is the predetermined number, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is judged to be in a high-ball state. is not executed, the ball-out state determination processing is terminated.

When the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display has been executed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times, after being judged as a high ball output state, Go to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball payout state flag to "0", after completing the adjustment of the first stage or the second stage (step 162SGS14), lighting of the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is ended. After completing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the state of high ball output (step 162SGS15), the post-judgment variable display remaining number and the post-judgment consecutive game number are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after execution of transmission setting of a ball payout state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball payout state flag set in any one of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06 and step 162SGS13, the ball payout state is determined. End the process. Incidentally, the ball output state designation command set for transmission in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

12-13(a) is executed as described above, the value of the ball output state flag changes to the value at the start of power supply as shown in FIG. 12-13(b). Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the period of the jackpot game is executed. When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" by determining the high ball output state, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. Extension of the variable display time of the first stage Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball output state in the ball output state determination process, a second stage having a variable display time longer than the first stage is displayed. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage jackpot game period. The fact that these adjustments are being made is notified by the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", when the number of consecutive games after determination reaches the end determination number of times, or when the variable display remaining number after determination becomes 0 (ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2" and the variable display is executed 100 times), the value of the ball output status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment ends.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, a mode is exemplified in which the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is based on this. However, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 does not turn on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball output state flag is changed. If a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", it may be lit only for a certain period of time after the power failure is restored.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", the form of executing both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball output state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 12-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball output state specifying command to the performance control board 12 only when the value of the ball output state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it transmit to. Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 162SG, a form in which the ball-out state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-out state designation commands, , a game state specifying command corresponding to each state of payout balls (low payout state, first high payout state, second high payout state) may be provided.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 12-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 162SG154, it should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 162SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" ( step 162 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 162 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In step 162SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" ( step 162 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 162 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 162 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 162 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 162 SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 162 SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 162SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 162SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 12-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 12-14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 162SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 12-17), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 162 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first checks the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, for example. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking it (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 12-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 162 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a jackpot (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4 is changed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 162 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 162SGS126), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 162 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 162 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and D, the characteristic portion 162SG includes a variation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range of possible random number values MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 small judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 162SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 12-15(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 162 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 162 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Go to 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), go to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the variable probability big hit A or the variable probability big hit B (step 162 SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is the variable probability big hit C, select and set the variation pattern determination table for special winning. (step 162SGS137) and proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 12-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 12-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 162SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit 162SG151B holds stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B The indicated reserved data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 162SGS144), it moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, read the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the processing of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 162SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the first special figure pending storage unit 162SG151A Hold stored corresponding to the hold number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 162SGS148), it moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. select and set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. In the processing of 162SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value), the special figure display result is " By determining whether or not to be a "big hit", when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined to be a "jackpot" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting section 162SG152 turns on the jackpot flag (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 162 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 162 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 162 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type memorize As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a "big hit" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b to select and set the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of pre-determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the result of determination of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 162SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 162SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 162SGS145 is "0" (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 162SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 162 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the judgment in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS167), and proceed to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving It is determined whether or not the time saving control is in progress (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162 SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 162 SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, storage of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading the value or the like, the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

When the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 162SGS173).

Also, if the number of pending memories of the identified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 162 SGS172; N), the fluctuation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as the table used for determining .

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in, for example, the random number buffer for variation Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). It should be noted that even if the variation pattern determined in this case is the same variation pattern, if the value of the ball-out state flag at that time is "1", the variation pattern corresponding to the first high-ball-out state is determined. When the variation pattern of the variable display time adjusted by one step is determined, and the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time subjected to the second-stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball output state flag.

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175. That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 162SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 162SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 162SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the notification command of the number of second pending memories, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS177, for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175, a special figure variable display time, which is a special symbol variable display time corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, is set (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. In addition, the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. , the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

FIGS. 12-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S113 to end the variation of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 162 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162 SGS190b). Also, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is turned on (step 162 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 162SGS182; Y). 162 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare performance for informing the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS187). At this time, as the big win display time set in the big win display time timer, the big win display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", 30000 corresponding to 30000 milliseconds, which is the unextended fanfare effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball output state flag is "1", 40000 milliseconds corresponding to 40000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60000 milliseconds corresponding to 60000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) in the big win opening counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), at step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". It should be noted that, although not particularly illustrated in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time-saving number counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is variable-probability jackpot C. If there is, the variable probability flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time saving number counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets "100" as the value of the time saving number counter. ing. Otherwise, go to step 162 SGS 196 .

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 162 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, after clearing the time-saving flag to turn off (step 162SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time-saving flag After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low-probability-low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is also reset along with the execution of step 162SGS195.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162 SGS 196 ). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number updating process, it is judged whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0". If the value is "0" after subtraction, the post-determination variable display remaining count update process is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). When the big win end display timer is not in operation (step 162 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for displaying the big win end on the image display device 5 is set as the big win end display time in the big win end display timer. (step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, a jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", a timer corresponding to 60000 milliseconds, which is the unextended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state, is activated. Value is set. Further, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70000 milliseconds, which is the ending rendering period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball payout state, is set and the ball payout state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 162 SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 162 SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing steps 162SGS211 and 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 162SGS214). Then, transmission setting of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag which are turned on is performed (step 162 SGS215).

Then, the update processing of the number of consecutive residences and the number of consecutive residences after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). Specifically, in this updating process, it is determined whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state as described above or the Renso jackpot that occurred in the high base state. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of the jackpot corresponding to the state before the occurrence of (“0” for low base, “1” for high base). Set to "1". On the other hand, in the case of a big win for consecutive villas, since the number of consecutive villas has already become a value other than "0", the number of consecutive villas is updated by adding one. Further, in the case of a big hit, if the initial value is set for the number of consecutive games after determination, the number of consecutive games after determination is updated by adding one.

And, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

In addition, although not shown in particular, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the CPU 103 does not reach the upper limit number of rounds in which the number of times of execution of the round is set in the process after opening the jackpot (step S116), set interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to the non-extended interval period of 5000 milliseconds corresponding to the low ball output state set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high paid ball state, is set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high paid ball state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the process after opening the jackpot is executed, and the interval period timer is timed out. Along with performing opening control of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

12-20, in the present characterizing portion 162SG, during the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the ball output state flag is set. Regardless of the value, since the round game continues until a certain open period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the big winning opening, the ball output state flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole due to the closing of the big winning hole, that is, the fanfare effect that it is impossible to win the prize ball The period, the interval period, and the ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball output state flag changes from 0→1→2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball state flag. The number of prize balls paid out per unit time is increased by changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period, which are periods in which winning is not possible, according to the value of the ball output state flag. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 12-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 Just do it.

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162 SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 162SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). .

Then, after executing either of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the effect limit flag is set to "1" (the display limit flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the command received at step 162SGS226 is a design designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processing of 1), the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the processing returns to step 162SGS221.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command in step 162SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; N), after setting according to other received commands (step 162SGS234), the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, if the received command is a ball-out state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the ball-out state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, A process such as turning on a flag may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball-out state by referring to the flag.

If there is no received command in the command reception buffer at step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first pending storage count notification waiting time or the second pending storage count notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162 SGS237). If the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories has not elapsed (step 162 SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the second reserved memory When the number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding entry whose storage has not been completed is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on), End command analysis processing.

FIG. 12-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. is determined by whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; N), proceed to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination It is determined whether or not the remaining variable display count is equal to or less than the prefetch limit count (step 162SGS242b). If the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit count (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. set.

Also, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is greater than the look-ahead limit count (step 162 SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect limit flag of the entry is on (whether "1" is set). is determined (step 162SGS242c). If the effect restriction flag is ON (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the effect limit flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether the design designation command of the entry is the fourth design designation or the sixth design designation command, that is, the design designation command is a probability variable jackpot It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designating command indicating C or a small hit (step 162 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of the probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 162 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the prediction is performed at the time of the jackpot (not shown). By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162 SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is decided not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C. Even in cases other than "jackpot", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 162 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 162SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 162 SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the processing of step 162 SGS247, whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇) that is a specific mode in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5D It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-24(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" than , especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 162SGS249).

After step 162 SGS245 is executed or when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 162 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

Further, in step 162SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 162SGS250), go to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Also, when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, the As shown in A), the pending display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (B), if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As a display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", as shown in FIG. When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag, for example, the second pending memory display in the display mode of "○" for the pending memory display of 1 and the display mode of "☆" for the pending memory display of 1 Displayed in area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory, as shown in FIG. 162SG shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process, which is executed at the start of the variable display and will be described later, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the form of executing the processing of step 162SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display in the second pending storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 162SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored reserved memory and the newly stored reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, but this invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 12-26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stopping symbol is the same chance number as the small hit, such as "334" or "778". decide from In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, "334", "778", etc., which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C, are used as stop symbols. decide from Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three patterns are irregular as the stop pattern. It is a pattern, and a combination (losing pattern) other than the above-described chance eye is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a combination of reach-lost decorative patterns such as "121" and "464" (losing pattern) ).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-27 to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in the present characterizing section 162SG, in the announcement effect determination processing, as will be described later, an example of a form in which execution of one of the four announcement effects A to D can be determined is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the number of executable notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the advance notice effect determination processing of the characterizing section 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball-out state and sets the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball-out state (step 162SGS290). It should be noted that the ball-out state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when the ball-out state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the low ball output state as the low ball output state, it selects the advance notice effect type determination table A and sets the ball output state to the first high ball output state. If the ball-out state is specified, the table B for determining the type of advance notice effect is selected.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the announcement effect is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the type of announcement effect in the case of execution are determined using the table for determining the type of announcement effect set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, using the advance notice effect type determination table A, if the variable display result is not reachable, 85 10% to decide not to execute the notice effect, 10% to decide to execute the notice effect A, 5% to decide to execute the notice effect B, and 0% to decide the execution of the notice effect C. Execution is decided, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a rate of 30%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 65%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the notice effect type determination table B, if the variable display result is non-reach, the notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of advance notice effect A is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a ratio of 25%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 50%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 15%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, the notification effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is not reachable, the notification effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of notice effect A is determined at a rate of 8%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 4%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 3%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 45%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Execution of the advance notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 15%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 45%. Execution of B is determined, execution of advance notice performance C is decided at a rate of 20%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 10%.

In other words, as the advance notice effects in the characteristic portion 162SG, the advance notice effect D is set to have the highest degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit), and the advance notice effect C has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the notice effect D. The degree of expectation for big win is set lower in the advance notice performance B than in the advance notice performance C, and in the advance notice performance A, the degree of expectation for big win is set lower than that in the notice performance B.例文帳に追加Then, when the notice effect is not executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (expectation for the big hit: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect A> non-execution of advance notice effect).

Also, looking at the number of notice effects that can be executed in each state, there are two notice effects that can be executed in the low ball state, the notice effects A and B, and the first high ball state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, and notice effects that can be executed in the second high ball state are notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D. There are four. In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, since the number of advance notice effects that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the continuous game state after the first hit occurs, the game is slowed down during the continuous game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high-ball output state, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293). If execution of the announcement effect is not determined (step 162 SGS293; N), the announcement effect determination process is terminated. Further, when the execution of the notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293; Y), the notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the notice Terminate the effect determination process.

After executing the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. No, that is, it is determined whether or not any one of the "notice effect A" and "notice effect B" has been decided in the notice effect determination process of step 162 SGS277.

When the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, sets a timer for waiting for the start of notice effect to a value corresponding to the period until the start of notice effect (step 162SGS279), and executes the notice effect. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the announcement effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through steps 162SGS279 and 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these advance notice effects, the characterizing section 162SG performs an effect (not shown) indicating a sign of the execution of the notice effect before the timing at which the notice effect is started, and the sign is started. Since the timing is the start timing of the notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the start of the notice effect is set, and the start timing of these notice effects is specified in the process table of the notice effect executed from the start of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if these foreshadowing effects are not implemented in the foreshadowing effect, the foreshadowing effect is started. Since the start timing is the start timing of the notice effect, the period until the start timing of the notice effect may be set in the notice effect start waiting timer.

At step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state, and selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball output state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the ball output state by referring to the value of the effect ball output state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball output state and the variation pattern specification command (step 162 SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, so that the characterizing portion 162SG determines whether the payout state is any of the low payout state, the first high payout state, and the second high payout state. Even , it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative design in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which it is possible to execute the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the ball output state by the value of the output ball state flag for effect and the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command can be transmitted to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and the performance control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command and the variation pattern determination state designation command every time it receives a decorative pattern according to the ball output state. may be executed.

FIG. 12-29 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect), or the flag during execution of the notice effect is on (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If both the timer for waiting for the start of the announcement effect and the in-execution flag for the announcement effect are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the announcement effect process of step 162SGS305.

At step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 162 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 162 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 162 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 162 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table ends.

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in a state where the notice effect start waiting timer is set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the notice effect start waiting timer in the notice effect process, and starts the notice effect. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the advance notice effect start waiting timer times out, that is, when it is time to start the notice effect, a process table for notice effect corresponding to the type of notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the notice effect is selected. Start a timer. That is, the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the first process data in the process table for notice effect. Also, the notice effect execution flag is turned on, and the notice effect processing is terminated.

When the notice effect is executed when the notice effect executing flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the notice effect by subtraction, and the process timer for the notice effect has timed out. Determine whether or not If the process timer for notice effect has not timed out, control of the effect device is executed according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for notice effect has timed out , to switch the process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next notice effect anew and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the notice effect processing as described above, the notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG described above, the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a form in which only lighting and extinguishing are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the high-ball state , the variable display time extension adjustment is performed because the variable display is performed, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not performed because the jackpot state is not performed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is lit in red (second mode). , it may be possible to confirm (know) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG described above, the continuous state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0→1→2 (when the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high State, changing to the second high ball output), by extending the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period of the jackpot game during the continuous game state, the balls paid out per unit time. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the number of prize balls is suppressed, that is, the awarding speed of prize balls is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table for the high output ball state, which has a high determination rate of the variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time such as the variation pattern of super reach than the ball state, it is controlled to the big hit game state. It is also possible to lengthen the period up to and suppress the number of balls released per unit time.

In addition, in the first high-ball state and the second high-ball state, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect for the form in which the variation pattern can be determined using the high-ball state variation pattern determination table. When the variable display remaining number after determination is set to 0 when the post-variable display remaining number is still set to a value of 1 or more, variable display execution pattern to be performed after the post-determination variable display remaining number becomes 0 occurs. There is a big difference between the variation pattern suggested by and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display (for example, despite suggesting variable display in the super reach variation pattern as a pre-reading notice effect, it is actually non- There is a possibility that a variable display is executed in a reach fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the pre-reading notice effect may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 12-23) of the feature part 162SG, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count. By limiting , it is possible to prevent a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the production pattern of the pre-reading notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby making the pre-reading notice effect inappropriate. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for fanfare effect according to the state of the game, and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. The ending effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed by selecting the process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination processing shown in FIG. When it is determined that the ball output state is the high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to the low ball output state to the high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to , the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) is possible. After setting the ball output state flag to "1", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, that is, the ball output state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are returned to the original period. ). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls put out per unit time during the period in which the state is continuous, and to prevent excessive increase in gambling property due to excessive payout of prize balls in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. By extending the length of time and not extending the special variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. It prevents the decline of interest due to the fact.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, by setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started, and 100 times of variable display is performed. An example is shown in which the value of the ball payout state flag is set to "0" again based on the execution, thereby completing the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a time measuring means (for example, real-time clock or timer) capable of measuring time is provided, and the time measuring means measures a certain period of time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. to end the adjustment. In other words, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain period of time has elapsed during the period of the consecutive game state after the CPU 103 set the value of the ball-out state flag to "1"".

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, only one execution of the variable display 100 times was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. When a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. You may make it finish adjustment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the value of the payout state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, when the payout state is the first high payout state or the second high payout state state, the special figure variable display time in the variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state) Therefore, by prolonging the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big win during the period of the continuous game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the continuous residence state without reducing the speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, during the jackpot game, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the value of the ball output state flag The fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period, in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole, are set longer than when "0" is set. For this reason, the number of game balls that can be won during each round game is not reduced according to the value of the ball output state flag, and the game balls cannot enter the big winning opening between each round game during the big win game. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time can be reduced during the period of the continuous state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the jackpot game is more likely than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag. Although the three periods of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, or You may make it lengthen two periods.

Further, in the characteristic part 162SG, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball output state flag from 0 to 1 to 2. , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining periods may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the recovery condition is not established, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to low ball output. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent the execution of adjustment to lower the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is satisfied, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after power failure occurs, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of power failure. If it is set, the CPU 103 again sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball output state flag, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls is performed when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from the power failure. can be resumed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power failure, if the value of the ball output state flag at the time of power failure is set to "1" or "2", the CPU 103 Although the form in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the status flag has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls, which has been performed when the power failure occurs, may not be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-13, when the CPU 103 judges that the high ball output state is in the ball output state determination processing, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls is being performed by lighting the high-ball output state notification LED 162SG071.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. An LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120 may be used. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can be transmitted to the effect control means (performance control CPU120) the control information (production control command) that can specify whether or not the high grant state. Then, the effect control means is provided with a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162 SG071) that can notify that it is controlled to a high grant state in response to specifying that it is a high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, as an informing means capable of informing that the high award state (high ball payout state) is determined in the present invention, a mode in which the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is provided was exemplified. is not limited to this, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for notifying that the high-ball state is determined by a specific sound output, high-ball state and Image display means (e.g., image display device 5) for notifying that the judgment is being made by displaying a specific image, and information output means capable of outputting information (signal) corresponding to the judgment of the high-ball state etc.

In addition, the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 should be the same as the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. So, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 in the lighting/extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. It is possible to transmit a ball output state designation command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the received ball-out state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball-out state. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed can be determined using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect (prediction effect type) that can be executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, or the second ball payout state. are different from each other, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the advance notice effect according to the ball-out state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-28, this characterizing portion 162SG is executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. Although the form in which the possible notice effect (type of notice effect) is different has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , in the case of the second ball-out state, the executable notice effect (forecast effect type) may be the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the ball-out state is low. In the ball state, the first high ball state, and the second ball state, the executable notice effect (prediction effect type) and the determination ratio of each notice effect type are the same. There may be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit during the variable display, and the type of the notice effect that can be executed is made different according to the state of the ball being put out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A continuation-suggesting effect that suggests continuation can be executed in a plurality of types of effects, and if the ball-out state is a low ball-out state, if it is in a first high-ball-out state, it is in a second high-ball-out state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of executable effect types and executable effect types may be varied as these probability-variable suggestive effects and continuous suggestive effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the pre-reading notice setting process. A pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed, and the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is varied according to which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Further, in the feature part 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading notice effect when the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number of times in the pre-reading notice setting process. (represented by an open circle)), so if the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the pending memory that occurred in the start winning in the first high-ball state or the second high-ball state, the pre-reading It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball payout state to the low ball payout state before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory which is the target of the notice effect. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the predictive limit count, prefetching notice effects are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball-out state is the first high-ball-out state or the second high-ball-out state, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed univocally. You may do so.

The features of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. be

For example, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are set longer than when the ball output state is the low ball output state. In addition, adjustment was made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some variation patterns, but this invention is not limited to this. , As a modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of the probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is reduced and the probability variable jackpot B is reduced more than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. may be increased. By doing so, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the jackpot type is likely to be determined as the variable probability jackpot B with the number of rounds of 5 rounds, and at the same time as the variable probability jackpot A with the number of lands of 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls put out in one big win game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to lower the speed of putting out prize balls in a high payout state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the probability variable jackpot (variable probability A, variable jackpot B, variable probability By reducing the determination ratio of the big win C) and increasing the determination ratio of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to be controlled to the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the big win game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit than the probability variable state (high probability high base state) is reduced, so as a result 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the continuous game state, and it becomes easier to control to the normal state. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" in this invention is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to step 162SGS194 in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Processing to subtract the value of the number counter, processing to determine again the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction, processing to turn off the time saving flag) corresponds.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the characteristic portion 162SG changes the game state from the time-saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, to terminate the continuous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or each time the variable display is terminated in the special symbol stop processing, a drop lottery (end lottery) in the high base state is executed, and the lottery is executed. It may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) low probability low base state based on the winning, that is, to end the continuous state. In the case where the drop lottery is executed each time the variable display is started or terminated, for example, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the ball output state is the low ball output state. It is sufficient to make it easier to win the drop lottery at a higher rate than in the case. In this way, in the high-ball output state, it is easy to determine the end of the consecutive game state, and it is easy to be controlled to the normal state. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process for executing a drop lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability variation flag and the time saving flag when winning the falling lottery corresponds.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then The value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the jackpot game during the period. is set to "1" and then a predetermined number of jackpot games have been executed during the period of the continuous residence state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) which is the end number of times. Based on this, the value of the ball output state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then When the total number of game balls entered into each prize winning hole or into the out hole reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period, the value of the output ball status flag is set to "0". That is, the ``end condition'' in the present invention is ``that the number of game balls used in the game during the period of the continuous game state after setting the value of the ball output state flag to ``1'' reaches a predetermined number. ” may be used. By doing so, the CPU 103 can output the game balls based on the fact that the number of game balls used in the game after setting the value of the output ball status flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the payout state flag is "1" (first high payout state) or "2" (second high payout state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although an example has been exemplified in which adjustment is executed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball payout state by prolonging the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball payout state flag Adjustment may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by making the determination ratio of each variation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12-30 and 12-31 as a modified example 162SG-5, a variation pattern for losing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, variation pattern judgment table B for loss for when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" (first ball output state), ball output state flag value is "2" (second ball output state) ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, 1 to 600 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, 1 to 400 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, 1 to 200 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table B for loss has a higher rate of non-reach variation patterns than the variation pattern determination table A for loss. While is low, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. In other words, the variation pattern determination table for failure B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the variation pattern determination table A for failure.

In addition, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss has a higher rate of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss. While it is low, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is set high. In other words, the deviation variation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the deviation variation pattern determination table B. FIG.

That is, among these variation pattern determination table A, variation pattern determination table B, and variation pattern determination table C, variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-31, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected to determine the variation pattern. If the value of the ball output status flag is "1" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table B for winning is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the ball output status flag is set. If the value is "2" and the variable display result is a failure, then the variation pattern determination table B for failure should be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is defined as the jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the characteristic portion 162SG) during the period of the continuous game state. Although the example of setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1" has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small winning game state. It's okay. In particular, a game having a game property in which the present invention can be frequently controlled to a small winning game state during the continuous game state and prize balls are paid out by winning the game balls into the big winning opening in the small winning game state. When applied to a machine (so-called small-hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big-hit game state and the number of times controlled to the small-hit game state during the period of the continuous state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball payout state flag from '0' to '1' based on the number of times) being reached, it is possible to realize adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball payout state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the time-saving control is exemplified by 100 times of variable display after the jackpot game, but the present invention is this. However, a non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times of time reduction control executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 times (for example, 50 times or 30 times). It should be noted that, in this way, when the time-saving control number of times is provided with a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 times or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state) After the execution of the non-probability variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time reduction control according to the non-probability variable jackpot is executed, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1", and then the variable display is executed 100 times. The value of the ball output status flag may be set to "0" even if it is not. In other words, if the non-probable variable jackpot is won in the continuous state, and the normal state is reached without winning the jackpot in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the non-probable variable jackpot is completed, the normal state is reached. Based on this, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball state may also be terminated.

Further, in this specification, both the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 109SG is applied and the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, Both the invention of the characteristic part 109 and the invention of the characteristic part 162SG may be applied to one pachinko game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display based on establishment of a starting condition and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emitting effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of the starting condition;
The effect executing means is configured to perform the specific light emission so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect when the starting condition is satisfied. Along with executing the effect, the light emitting means is made non-light emitting for a predetermined period from when the starting condition is established until the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
The ratio of displaying the specific display of the special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than the ratio of displaying the specific display of the first special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images